Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. 1 .

2 .

You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. such as duct. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and plumbing engineering workflows. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. fixtures. electrical panels.

NOTE Depending on your installation. So. Create schedules. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. After completing each exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. is located and accessed in the training files location. In this exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. However. Create detail views. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. You do not design entire systems. Metric file names have an _m suffix. views. On the Contents tab. you learn where the training files are located. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. when you add ductwork. such as templates and families. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Contact your CAD manager for more information. and tags. you can choose to save your work.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. as well as how to open and save them. to provide a richer and more finished design. and sheets to document the project. For example. For example. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. however. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. annotations. Metric: files for users working with metric units. When you install the training files as instructed. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. your Training folder may be in a different location. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. When you open a training file. templates.

You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. select the folder in which to save the new file. and click the Training Files icon. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and you can open any supported file type. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As. and click Open. the Open dialog displays. double-click Imperial or Metric.rvt) is selected. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. For Files of type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. You may close the file with or without saving changes. 8 If you have made changes. a list of file types displays. scroll down. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For example. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. Accessing Training Files | 5 . ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. enter the new file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. if you open settings.rvt and make changes. 4 Click the training file name. 3 In the right pane.rvt. For File name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. drawings. and schedules required for a building project. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. hence. the operation of the software is parametric. scope. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. every drawing sheet. the floor or roof remains connected. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. drawing sheets. ■ ■ 7 . sections. You learn the terminology. In this case. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the hierarchy of elements. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. quantities. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. the parameter is one of association or connection. 2D and 3D view. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. If you move the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the door retains this relationship to the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. schedules. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. As you work in drawing and schedule views.

and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. and 2D detail components. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sinks. and reference planes are datum elements. tags. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ducts. and electrical panels. and electrical panels. dimensions. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. tags. boilers. sprinklers. levels. Datum elements help to define project context. Examples include detail lines. filled regions. walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. boilers. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sprinklers. grids. When you change something. For example. sinks. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. They help to describe or document the design. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view.

the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Most often.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and drawings of the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you can explicitly control them. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. schedules. and types. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and so forth). you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. views of the project. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. In other cases. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. from geometry to construction data. By using a single project file. families. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. section views. for example. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. first floor. elevation views. If you can draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Often. North . programming is not required. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. To place levels. floors. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. such as roofs. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. However. top of wall. For example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view.

System families include ducts. A type can be a specific size of a family. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. With a few clicks. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and similar graphical representation. showing. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. pipes. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. hiding. Type: Each family can have several types. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Then experiment with them. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can also display several project views at one time. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. However. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. each in-place family contains only a single type. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. A type can also be a style. such as a A0 title block. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. identical use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families can be transferred between projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. or layer the views to see only the one on top. and wires.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .

When working on the Modify tab. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. then select what you want to modify. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . architect-specific tools. tools used for running analysis on the current design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and CAD files. and settings. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. project and system parameters. and for switching views.. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems. select the tool first.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. closes the application menu (double-click). a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. when adding duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. By default.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. For example. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.

(Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing. click. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ... (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.

provides views including Default 3D. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.On the application menu.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. family. click.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. Camera. annotation. (Licensing) close the file. but is not enabled by default. annotation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. to. and Walkthrough. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file. or template file. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Publish) print the current drawing. saves a current project.. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.

In addition. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. displaying the same information.To undo or redo a series of operations. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. To show the Status Bar again. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or the Family Editor. when you switch to another editing mode. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. When you are using a command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. However. workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. When you are highlighting an element or component. Modify. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clipboard. Group. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. repeat the command.

Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. click (Modify). Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. for example. select one or more elements of the same category. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the following steps. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.rvt. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. For example. 1 Click ➤ Open. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

Modifying the View | 19 . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. on the Navigation bar. 9 To display SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

For more information about SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press ESC. and click tin the Options dialog. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. As you move the mouse. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

called drag controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. display along the ends. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots. as shown.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the duct.HVAC Plan .Design. 2 Enter ZR. These are the drag controls. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. and open Level 2 . Similar controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. 6 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Move. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

In this case. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. for example. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position. and drag it to the left as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected.Some commands. 10 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice.Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . For example. such as the Modify Ducts command. Click OK. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Select Mechanical . (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

rte template. 27 . 6 Click OK. create and manage views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as the default project units and settings. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Project. under Template file. under Create new. settings. You can either select a template from the template library. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. link files. 7 In the Project Browser. and geometry from the starting template. New projects inherit all the families. You can choose from several templates. you learn how to start a project from a template. click Training files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as coordination review and interference checking. and loadable families. the default building levels and standard views. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric ➤ Templates. such as ducts and pipes. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open North. In that case. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 5 In the New Project dialog. Finally. system families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. use copy/monitor. click Browse. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.

click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. under Energy Analysis. Click Cancel. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. select Manchester. click Edit. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . review the construction materials listed. For example. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. When you select the material. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for Energy Data. select Project template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Browse. ■ For Building Construction. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Click OK twice. (Browse). create another new project using the Construction template. and select the Systems-Default_Metric.8 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Location.rte template and click Open. If you want to use a template other than the default. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can select it now. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ Under Create new. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. navigate to Metric Templates. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click (Browse). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for City. select Level 1. NH. select School or University. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 10 Using the same method. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Choose Template dialog. Click OK.

and demand factors for electrical systems. for 90. under Pipe Settings. click Sizes. 110. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. 22 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. 260. power distribution systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 110. and 140. for 20. 24 In the right pane. click Rectangular. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 23 In the left pane. click Round. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.00 mm. select Identity Data. 33 Click OK.00 mm. and 310. under Duct Settings.00 mm. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under.00 mm. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. wiring. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 140. 27 Click OK. click Wiring. Holding CTRL. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. for 90. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK twice. select Views. under Duct Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Categories.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. and fire protection systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 26 In the right pane. piping.000 mm. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 290. plumbing.

For Sort by. sheets. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Linking Projects In this exercise. From the Positioning list. To enable this coordination. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. click Browse. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. under Create new.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. For Then by. select Sub-Discipline.Origin to Origin. families. select Auto . click Training. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. select View Name. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. select Family and Type. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. and groups that are contained in a project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 38 Close the file. Click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. under Template file. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Associated Level. In addition. You need to create the MEP model for the project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.rvt. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.

8 If necessary. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select Room Bounding.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 12 Click OK. under Constraints. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking Projects | 31 .Mech. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area.

24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar. click the level line for 03. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 19 On the left side of the view. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. click Plan View types. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Floor. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.

click By Host View. 27 In the drawing area. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. indicating that a relationship is established. click Custom. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. select Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. level 3. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. and the level 4. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. and that the copied elements are monitored. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. for the link file. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. After copying. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 29 In the drawing area. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears above the copied elements. and click to select the linked model.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. indicating that an element has changed. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. Linking Projects | 33 . a warning message displays. If you modify a monitored element. 34 On the Basics tab. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. warnings notify you of any violations. highlight the linked model. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

for the link file. Under Visibility. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North .Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 7 Click OK twice. deselect Parking. Click OK. 36 Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Custom. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 5 On the Basics tab. select Custom. 3 In the View templates dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Click OK. and Topography. for Name. 2 In the New View Template dialog. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Roads. deselect Levels. Under Visibility. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. click Edit.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Site. click Custom. under View Properties. Planting. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view.

5 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. select Invert background color.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 3 Under Colors. These settings control the graphics. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and your username when using worksharing. Notice that the drawing area is black. under View Templates.rte. notification preferences. they are not saved to project files or template files. click Browse. Modifying System Settings | 35 . journal cleanup options. 8 Click ➤ Options. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. select Mechanical and click OK. 9 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. selection default options. under Template file. click Training Files. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. and click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment.

However. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 14 Click OK. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. the elements causing the error display using this color. For Tooltip assistance. When an error occurs. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. select yellow. family template files. and click OK. 18 Select the wall. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select None. you specify default file locations. 17 Press ESC to end the command. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 11 In the Color dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. including your default project template.10 Under Colors. 21 Close the file without saving it. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. click the value for Selection color. click the File Locations tab. 2 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 13 Under Notifications. 12 Click the General tab. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.3 Under Default template file. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. click Places. note the list of library names. TIP To view a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. centralized. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. However. and Import dialogs. 7 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 10 In the Places dialog. and you can create new libraries. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Default path for family template files. Specifying File Locations | 37 . click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. click Browse. or loading a Revit MEP file. you can start a new project with that template. Save. 4 Click Cancel. When you are opening. Load. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. saving. and click Open. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Browse. such as in a large. You can modify the existing library names and path. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 8 Click Cancel. ➤ New ➤ Project. In the following illustration. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.

click My Library. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and Import dialogs. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Save. Load. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click (Add Value). and click (Browse). and change the name to My Library. click the My Library icon. and select it as the library path. or families. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .11 In the Places dialog. templates.

14 Click in the drawing area. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 19 Click Cancel. such as bump maps. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 23 Click 24 Click OK.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. This path is determined during installation. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 9 In the text editor. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. click the Spelling tab. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Places. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you work in a large office. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click Edit. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. view the current path. 3 Under Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. custom color files. 11 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. specify the new location here. 5 In the text editor. and decal image files. 22 Select My Library. 21 On the File Locations tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 27 Click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms.

21 Under Personal dictionary. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 18 Click ➤ Options. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. work with snapping turned off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 19 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. and enter 500 . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. As you zoom in and out within a view. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Restore Defaults. 4 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. under Template file. click Close.rte. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap settings. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Edit. click OK. You can turn snap settings on and off. under Dimension Snaps. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise.17 In the Spelling dialog. click Training Files.. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 20 Under Settings. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Browse. 23 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. delete sheetmtl-CU.

you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If you do not have a wheel button. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching. For example. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. This is the increment that you added previously. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. use the wheel button on your mouse. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. such as ZO to zoom out. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. click OK. TIP To zoom while sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.

20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 25 Click OK.. and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. 26 Close the file. Do not set the wall end point. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. the midpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 19 Enter SM. and delete the value 500 . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and move the cursor to the right. If you move the cursor along the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. with or without saving it. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

In this lesson. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. and then you create a plenum level. However. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). At the end of the tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first plan the system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. methodology. you can choose to save your work. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. By following the recommended workflow. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This system consists of a cooling tower.autodesk.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.

Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). click to select it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.MEP. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. click Training Files. ceilings. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. not in the MEP training file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. under Constraints. and click OK. and after the linked model highlights. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 6 In the Project Browser. roof.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. Next. and double-click West . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Room Bounding. you add a level for plenums. In this section. These components are defined in the architectural training file. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.

and in the Plan View Types dialog. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). The new level is placed. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click Properties. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). right-click Level 2 Plenum. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Click Plan View Types. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. enter 2600mm. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. For Offset. 16 Press Esc. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and click OK. 9 On the Draw panel. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.

Plenum. Under Identity Data. you can choose to save your work. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Extents. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. For Cut plane. enter an Offset of 300mm. for View Range. In this exercise. for Level. In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the next exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for Top. For View Classification.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. select MEP . enter 0. ■ Click OK twice. Under View Depth. 20 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Plenum Plan. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Default View Template. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. for View Scale. click Edit. For Sub-Discipline. However. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select Design. select Level Above (Level 3). and for Offset. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

rvt. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For (Tag Location). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Horizontal. For Upper Limit. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Offset. select Level 2 Plenum. and ceilings). Placing Spaces | 49 . 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select New. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. For Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.

The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.7 Click to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 9 Select the space. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files. for Number. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the drawing area.

17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Offset. select Level 3. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. enter 0. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and for Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. click Training Files. for Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and select Corridor. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.7 In the Project Browser. which was numbered 219Q. and change the space number to 216A. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 10 Click in the number column. click in the name column. 9 In the schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule.

12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. as shown. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 15 Press Esc twice. 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.

11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view.4 Press Esc. select Level 3. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. expand Spaces. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click in the chase area to place the space. select Roof Level. select the space. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. On the Options Bar. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 6 Enter VG. and then click OK. In the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. and click Element Properties. select Interior and Reference. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. For Offset.

19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. For Number. floors. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 1200. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Bounding elements (such as walls. Under Identity Data. ceilings. 15 Press Esc. All spaces in the view are tagged. under Loaded Tags.■ For Limit Offset. enter Chase. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and click OK. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Space Plan. enter 225PC. for Name. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 17 Type ZF. and maximize the view.

Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. which removes the space from the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. To display space reference lines. In the next exercises. 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. indicating that it’s the active view. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.20 Close the file with or without saving it. under Spaces. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m.rvt. In this exercise. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. click Reference. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click View ➤ Zones. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Zoning is highlighted.

Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. and a new zone is created. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you assign spaces to zones in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click OK. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. the Edit Zone tab displays.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). indicating that the space is occupiable. click Training Files. As you do this. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. ) or 5 In the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to a zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference.rvt. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. select Occupiable. under Spaces.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Instruction. 4 In the drawing area. Click OK. type VG. Expand HVAC Zones. In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction 221. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. To view the zone in the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. select Computer Lab 222. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and modify the zone properties. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and Electrical 220 spaces. and click Finish Editing Zone. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Using the Edit Zone tab.

for Name. 5 Click in the Level 1 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Finish Editing Zone. 9 In the System Browser. under Identity Data. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. To display space reference lines. click Reference.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Zoning is highlighted. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view.Area B. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand 2 .rvt. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Zoning view to activate it.West . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). enter 2 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. under Spaces.Zoning.West . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and click OK. 11 Close the System Browser.

8 In the Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Verify that the distance is 12mm. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. zoom out. click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view. Select Attached End. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. for Name Value. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. click the corner where the Top. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Wireframe is selected. and click OK. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. you verify the building. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. double-click the zone tag. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.rvt. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . click Training Files. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and zone information. Front. enter Lounge . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Zoning view. on the ViewCube. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.Zoning to make it the active view. space. and select 109 Lounge. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.East. double-click Level 1 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. you isolate the space. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. click (Isolate).The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ Click (Highlight). select 1_South_Area C. ■ ■ On the Details tab.

you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space.22 °C : N/A is specified. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. select 109 Lounge. click . ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Building> is selected. Below the list of spaces and zones. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.11 °C : 32. and humidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. heating air temperature.33 °C : 12. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that 21. and air changes per hour. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. the space information displays for the selected space. click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Next. click . For Cooling Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. cooling air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. and click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Building> is selected. and dehumidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For People. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation. click . and then click OK. verify that 23. For Heating Information. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Electrical Loads. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Construction Type. scroll down in the left pane.22 °C : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.

enter 0. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and other room-bounding components. floors. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. roofs. For Offset. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. click Cancel. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. open MEP . 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and zone information. select Plenum. space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Under Energy Analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). In this exercise. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. for Number. Because this is an unoccupied space. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Click OK. and select space Plenum 212P. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. enter 212P. For Name. Under Energy Analysis.

verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. is selected. enter 03101. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 8 In the drawing area. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Postal Code. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Ground Plane.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click in the Value field. right-click. For Building Construction. For Location. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. verify that New Construction is selected. double-click Level 2 . verify that 300 is specified. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. select space Library 219. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice.rvt. and click Element Properties. verify that Level 1 is selected. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and click OK. On the Weather tab. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. for Energy Data. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. this option adjusts the times automatically. under Energy Analysis. you need to select this option. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. for City. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Export Complexity.Space Plan. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Project Phase. under Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In order to select a space. click Edit. for Building Service. NH. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Manchester. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . If. On the Place tab. select School or University. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. click Training Files.

In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. click in the Value column. For Condition Type. select Actual. select Specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Library . Click OK. For Building Construction. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Select the space associated with the warning. is specified. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Specified. You have verified the building information. For People. click Edit. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. select Heated and cooled. click Edit. For Latent. and click OK. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. verify that Occupiable is selected. Under Power. verify that <Building> is specified. for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Location. and then click . you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Select Area per person. NH. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Space Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. both. enter 45 W.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Manchester. and enter 15 sq. for Values. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Next. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). for Values. For Sensible. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. m. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 60 W. For Building Service. it should be corrected before you calculate loads.Audio Visual. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 12 Click the Details tab. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. for Values. or neither. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected.

15 Review the loads report for project. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. 21 Click OK. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. or zone information. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.11°C. and under Heating Information. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 19 In the drawing area.Space Plan. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and click OK. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. select 219 Library. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. There should be no warnings displayed. You should correct the space error in the building model. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. weather. and can be modified here. In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. under Energy Analysis. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Calculate. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and zone information for the building model. 16 After you review the loads report. click Information). (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and a loads report displays. space. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. or make any changes to the model.

in relatively small increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Click OK.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click to the right of the building to place the legend. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 5 Zoom in to the legend.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

and click OK.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select Cooling Load . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select the color scheme legend.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. click Training Files.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 11 Using the method learned previously.rvt. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter .(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select HVAC. and then click . enter Space Airflow Schedule. for Select available fields from. For Formula. select Spaces. ■ Click Calculated Value. and click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. In the Calculated Value dialog.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. Select Formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Name. click (Browse). In the Fields dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. for Formula. select Air Flow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select New Construction. For Phase. Under Available fields. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Type.Space Fill is the active view. select Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . more category options are available. Select Schedule building components. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Airflow Delta. Click OK. Click OK. For Discipline.

notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and Blank line. Click OK twice. select Not Between. verify that Show is highlighted. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. In the Color dialog. ■ The schedule displays. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Background Color. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select Level. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. For Then by. select red. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. click the color swatch. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Fields. and then select Hidden field. Under Conditions to Use. select Airflow Delta. a view opens that contains the selected space. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Value. select Number. Select Ascending. select Level. right-click to access schedule properties. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Header. and then click Conditional Format. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and click OK.

In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.

In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals. After system creation. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. you will create supply air systems. and work with the airflow schedule. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view. and scroll to space 223. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

17 Move the cursor down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. If the host element is modified or moved. type 3600. click Place on Face. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. enter 215 L/s. and then press Esc to end the command. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and press Enter. Also. as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 9 On the Placement panel. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.

Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. As you place the return diffusers. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 22 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. 21 On the Options Bar. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and click Open. click Place on Face. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 25 In the drawing area.rfa. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.

and click OK. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click to select the lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . click Yes.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers. Level. as shown. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. select Strong Reference. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

and then press Esc twice. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. align the other return diffuser. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 43 Using the same method. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. as shown. 40 In the drawing area. select the vertical grid line as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan.

46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.44 While pressing Ctrl. clear LeftArrow. select both return diffusers. As you place the air terminals. and click Element Properties. and press Enter. right-click. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . for Flow. enter 310 L/s. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. under Mechanical. and click OK. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and on the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. select M_Supply Diffuser .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.200 Neck. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. at the lower left corner of the building. click 1 : 100. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Scale.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. the space crossing lines display. and double-click Level 1 . verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar.Design to make it the active view. 8 In the Type Selector.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.HVAC Plan . expand HVAC . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans.

Under Mechanical . 11 Select the diffuser. for Offset. move the cursor down. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. under Constraints. and then press Enter. Click OK. By copying the diffuser. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. As a result. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. type 6000. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 2400. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. for Flow. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. 15 Press Esc. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. enter 170 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 .Airflow.

select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. and then press Esc.16 Using the same method. 18 On the Options Bar.

select Air Terminals. type. for Embedded Schedule. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. mark. For Category. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. tile the windows. under space 115. Next. and press Enter. click Edit. double-click System Type. 26 Using the method learned previously. select 21. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. Mark. under Other. and then right-click in the schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. 25 Click OK 3 times. for Sort by. 27 In the schedule. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. and Flow. select Mark. 29 Using the same method. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. it is a negative value. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. enter 210 L/s. for Flow. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. under Available Fields. and click View Properties. Type.

As you highlight the zone. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. 31 In the drawing area.Design. as shown.HVAC Plan . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. and maximize Level 1 .

High Efficiency .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.Horizontal . 33 Click OK. select M_WSHP . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 35 In the Type Selector. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.7-18 kW .43 W (approximately 1. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 36 In the drawing area. and under Energy Analysis.3 times the heating load). 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.

you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. As you add diffusers to systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. However. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. right-click the title.HVAC Plan . and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. the space crossing lines display. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.rvt. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then create the logical connection between the system components. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 6 Keep the System Browser open. enter . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. including energy analysis. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. After creating the logical connection. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.Design is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. In this exercise. click Training Files.

On the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the number of elements is updated. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. System Name. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 15 Click Cancel. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. the air terminals are the children. 11 In the drawing area. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. review the Number of Elements. 18 Click OK. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Connect Into. 17 Using the method learned previously. 12 In the System Browser.

You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. click Training Files. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.rvt. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Identity Data. for Mark. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. In this exercise.Rename the system Next. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 22 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Mechanical. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for System Name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3000. Also. click Settings. for Solution Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. the space crossing lines display. select Network. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and display solution 1. For Offset. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. For Duct Type. select the upper left diffuser. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . For Duct Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the Network type provides several solutions.HVAC Plan. In this case. 4 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . enter 3000. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). A Generate Layout tab displays. Select Branch. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. which provides various layout tools.Round. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.

as is the elbow itself. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. or manually modify the duct. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. enter 900. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Click OK. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. click Modify. 11 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as shown. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. you’ll get an error in a later step. For example.

Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and click to select it. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and equipment. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . fittings. for Color Scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .Flow. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. highlight a segment of the main duct.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. The first time you press Tab. Usually. a disconnection exists. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. thus it is not part of the system.

for Values Displayed. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Graphics. select the WSHP. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . but not all values are used in this view. under Mechanical .Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select By View. for Flow. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 20 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and press Enter. and then click OK. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. and on the Options Bar.

Click OK. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Only.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Select Restrict Height. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. for Schemes. highlight a segment of the duct. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click to select it. 26 Click OK. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.Velocity. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. click Cancel. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select Friction.65 Pa/m. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and enter . select Duct Color Fill . and drag it to the right. select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. for Branch Sizing. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and select 400. select Calculated Size Only. Select the upper segment of main duct.

you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. pressure. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Use the information that displays (flow. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure. and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).The ductwork and fittings are updated. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.

NOTE As you inspect a system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to specify the end of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).HVAC Plan . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.

select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 15 On the ViewCube. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. right-click the connector grip. for Offset.3D MEP.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. click the corner where the Top. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. Front. enter 3000. NOTE When drawing duct.

17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice.

and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Mechanical . and click to select it. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Constraints. such as a plenum. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 40 Using the same method. for Flow. clear Restrict Height. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click OK.

108 .

Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. 109 . Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Horizontal High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.rvt. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.7-18kW .Left Return . and select M_WSHP . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. indicating that it’s the active view. in corridor 328.

click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter 600. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. as shown. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 8 Click the corridor wall face. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .) 14 Click Modify. as shown. and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.

enter 0. enter 2750.75 L/s.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Mechanical. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 21 Click Modify. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. for Water Flow. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . for Offset. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump.

Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Unlike logical connections (systems). Create the logical connection between the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you create the return and supply piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. including flow and pressure. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.

This display indicates that the system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. while pressing Ctrl. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System | 115 . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Mech 330). As you assign equipment to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 5 In the System Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. right-click the Systems column heading. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.Design is highlighted.rvt. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping.HVAC Plan . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select the 2 WSHPs. where it is easier to review the information. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.

17 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 10 On the Options Bar. for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 12 In the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. You have created the hydronic return system. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that on the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. under Design ➤ HVAC . 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In cooling mode.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating a Piping System | 117 . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . 19 In the Project Browser. and bypasses the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and select the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK.

In the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. enter 0. 32 In the System Browser. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click OK. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. including the flow rate and size of the component. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). for Water Flow. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The hydronic supply system highlights in red.8. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Select. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. You also manually modify the layout path as required. under Mechanical.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. and click OK. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Expand All. and click Column Settings.

click Check None. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you can place the cursor over a system component. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the system. 5 In the Filter dialog.Mech 330). you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. then the Select a System dialog displays. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Training Files. A system preview displays in red. the boiler. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). select Mechanical Equipment. and click to select it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. When you draw a box to select components. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .

It does not reference the architecture. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 11 On the Options Bar. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select CHWR. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. select Perimeter. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. 10 Click OK. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. duct. 13 Click Cancel. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter 450. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components.

16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.75 L/s. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. With each Tab. 19 In the drawing area. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 17 Optionally. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 1. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.50 L/s.75 L/s).50 L/s.

the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . click Edit System. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 32 Click Finish Editing System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Number of Elements is now 8.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser. Logically.

Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. which propagates flow throughout the system. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Next. 35 Using the drag control. access its instance properties. 38 Using the same method. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. you physically close the CHWR loop.94 L/s. as shown.44 L/s.50 L/s. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. under Mechanical. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 6. note that the value for Flow is 4. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.

and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Slope.00%.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 450. select a WSHP. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. 41 Click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5. Click Settings. enter 0. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click OK. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.

as shown. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Both sections are at the same elevation.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the piping system. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 50 Using the same method. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. as shown. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design is highlighted. and the return pipes are magenta. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D Building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. as shown. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click to specify the reference point. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. 12 In the 3D view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. 13 In the plan view. and click OK.

enter 600. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. and press Enter.In a plan view. and you select 1 connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 381. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ Move the cursor down.

select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. As you place piping runs that are close together. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.

Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. as shown. and select it. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe.

and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe.28 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. enter 1200. for Offset.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. type 300.

You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system. Next.37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and click OK.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click.44 L/s). 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 6. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . as shown. the value is 0 L/s. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. for Cooling Water Flow. and click Element Properties. 41 Using the same method. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that under Mechanical.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping.50 or 50% of the Flow. 44 In the 3D view. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Connect the cooling tower Next. 48 In the plan view. 42 Click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . right-click. 43 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 3. 46 Press Esc. In the Instance Properties dialog.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc.44 L/s.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. When the valve is open. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and is heated by the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt.52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default.4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 145 . and select M_Ball Valve . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . place another M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click OK. verify that Flow is 0 L/s.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click. Adding Valves | 147 .44 L/s. 19 Using the same method. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 6.

validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.44 L/s. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. and select M_Ball Valve . 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. click Training Files. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. 22 Using the method you just learned.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.44 L/s. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Initially. validate that the Flow is 6. and select M_Ball Valve . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. In heating mode.

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.HVAC Plan . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. indicating that it’s the active view.Size. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Flow.Design is highlighted. select Pipe Color Fill . click Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 149 . and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.

IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). or offset elevations are incorrect. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Friction. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 1. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc. select a different layout solution. Select And. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and for Velocity. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. or manually modify the pipe.5 m/s. Either relocate the system components. and enter 220 Pa/m.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and double-click 3D Building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. click Training Files. Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 151 .

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. and pressure information including pressure loss. as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as shown. This information helps you modify the system design. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow.

Checking Piping Systems | 153 . click Training Files. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. In this exercise.HVAC Plan . Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. targeting those systems that need attention. and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. and double-click Level 3 . 10 Click Finish.Design.Note that the Flow is 1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK.7.Design ➤ Floor Plans. inspect Section 6 again.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.0 L/s. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. for Fluid Temperature. 9 Using the same method. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. In the left pane of the Open dialog.4 Pa. the Static Pressure is 41916. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 32° C.1 Pa. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.

Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. double-click Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click View. otherwise. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and confirm unassigned system components. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. In the System Browser. For example. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If you place components without assigning them to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 10 Using the same methods. right-click the Systems titlebar. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.Design. As you learned when placing components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 9 Right-click CHWS. 12 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. After you assign components to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and click Expand All. expand the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all components to systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design floor plan. TIP If you have multiple views open.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 4 In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and for pipe sizing. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. click Close. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and select Level 3 . 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 In the Project Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system.HVAC Plan . right-click Hydronic Return. thus assigning the components to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. the pipe is associated with that system. 7 In the System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.

14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting.

select 90. Select Correction Factor. wiring. Click OK. For Temperature. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Wiring Types. enter 70. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper. enter THHN. distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ For Material. enter 1. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. For Factor.Wire Sizes. You also add a wiring type.04. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. and demand factors that are applied in the design. In this exercise you review electrical settings. expand Wiring . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select Copper. ■ Click New Correction Factor.rvt. speeding up the design phase. For Material. As you place components and create circuits.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. click (Open).

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Steel. For L-L Voltage. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Distribution Systems. select 120. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Insulation. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select 75. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Select Neutral Required. select Hot Conductor Size. enter 220. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Voltage Definitions. enter 2000. Under More Than. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. enter 240. For Maximum. select THHN. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Max Size.0. enter 50. enter 1. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For Value. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Wires. enter 120/240. enter 250. enter 240. select Single. By specifying a range. For Minimum. For Conduit Type. select 10000 VA. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 3. Click OK. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. For Neutral Size. Click Split. select 240. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select Power. select Demand Factors. For Neutral Multiplier. For L-G Voltage.

and conference rooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . under the Electrical . For Type of Parameter.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.rvt. For Group Parameter Under. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.Lighting. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Lighting group in the space element properties. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. such as offices. Later in the tutorial. click Add. select Spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Click OK twice. enter Required Lighting Level. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. click Training Files. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Discipline. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. and double-click Level 2 . select Illuminance. 5 In the drawing area. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Under Categories. restrooms.Lighting Plan. Verify that Instance is selected. select Electrical. select Electrical . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . click (Open).

17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . and for Key Name. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. For Name. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. double-click Required Lighting Level. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Open Office. enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys. and click OK.Lighting. Click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. enter Lighting Levels. select Spaces. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Electrical . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. under Available Fields. enter 485.

Notice that as you enter the data. 21 Click OK twice.Lighting Plan. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. click Edit. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. select Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 22 Using the same method. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. for Sorting/Grouping. change the sort order back to the default setting. which is mapped to project units. Select Blank Line. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. the value input applies only to the selected space. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. that Required Lighting Level is blank. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. for Lighting Levels. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . select Instruction-Standard. under Identity Data. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. 27 Click OK. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Later in this exercise. click (Open). since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

00 lx. ■ Click OK. select Spaces. select Required Lighting Level. enter 900. and press ENTER. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and click (Add Value) five times. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.00. click Training Files. for Category.00 lx. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.rvt. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. click (Duplicate). and press ENTER. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. enter Required Lighting and click OK. enter Required Lighting Levels. for Name. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and in the At Least column. click (Add Value) again. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.00. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 00 lx still selected. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. For example.00 lx. and click (Add Value). if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. Select the scheme for 500 lx. enter 200.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Under Schemes. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. verify the By Range is selected. enter 800. for Title. Select the scheme for 450. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. and press Enter. For Color.

For Color Scheme. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Delta. and Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . For Discipline. Name. for Available Fields.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Required Lighting. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Type. Level. select Electrical. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. For Name. select Spaces. 13 Click Calculated Value.Lighting CF.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. double-click Number. and double-click Level 2 . click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Illuminance. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Average Estimated Illumination. 8 In the drawing area. select Spaces.

Select Blank Line. select Average Estimated Illumination.■ For Formula. for Test. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Required Lighting Level. press the spacebar. under Condition. select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Select Header. and click Browse. select Red. for Custom Colors. for Fields. click Browse. select Level. On the Formatting tab. Click OK twice. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Formula. Click Background Color. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click Conditional Format. For Value. Click OK three times. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Not Between. Click OK. for Sort by. type a hyphen.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. Then. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Basic Colors. select Orange. click (Open). click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. You can create additional color schemes. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Under Scheme Definition. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. In the Color dialog. 2 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.Lighting CF view is open. for the Spaces Category. select the color legend. By using orange as the color for this range.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.

Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click the Level 2 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.

Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range is satisfied. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 19 Press ESC to end the command. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click to place the fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.the +/. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) .5 fc range. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.277V.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

enter 162. In the Name dialog. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Name enter and click OK.00 VA. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. for Apparent Load. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. scroll to view space space Library 219. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. click (Open). for Type Mark. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and click OK. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Electrical. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Color Preset. Placing Switches. ■ Click Apply. ■ Under Photometrics. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Initial Intensity. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. select Xenon and click OK. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. select T5 [HO]. junction boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.ies and click Open. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter F15. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Ballast Loss Factor. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select 463T5_S.93. for Lamp. 9 In space Library 219. and receptacles to your design. you add switches. enter . ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Placing Switches. specify 15000. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click Training Files. and Receptacles | 183 .85.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.rvt. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. In the next exercise. select the top center fixture. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.00 lm. enter . The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Click OK. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux. Junction Boxes.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.277V.

11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 . Select M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. The element type M_Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Junction Boxes.

Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. 15 Select the junction box. NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.14 Press ESC to end the command. Click Edit Type. enter 2750. Click OK twice. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 .Offset. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Electrical. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. note the Number of Poles is 1. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. zoom to space Library 219.

22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Select Size. Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings. Click OK. 24 For any column. and Receptacles | 187 . expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Distribution System. and Number of Elements. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Space Number. and Voltage. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Expand Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. 23 In the System Browser.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

select Copy and Multiple. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

208V MCB . click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.Surface: 100A. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Adding wiring to a project is optional. click (Open). 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area.

Loads. enter PP-2B. Click OK.Loads. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter LP-2B.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System. Click OK. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers.480V MCB . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. 15 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System.

Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . which is the logical connection between the elements. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221. click Check None. and for Category. 23 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 20 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

28 Press ESC to end the command.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .35 Select the left three-way switch. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

except without wire. enter 2. click (Open). 42 In the Filter dialog. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . and for Category. Click OK. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. and create permanent wiring. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. select Wires.Loads. for Hot Conductors. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 2 In the drawing area. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.39 Using the same method. click Check None. click Training Files. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.

8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. expand Power. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Voltage. 13 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and then expand circuit 1. and verify that Load. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. Rating. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Click OK. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. Distribution System. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. change the Voltage to 277V. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Click OK. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical. 30 Close the System Browser. Click Tags. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 With the junction box still selected. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click Yes. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click Edit Type. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 40 Click OK twice. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. For Circuit Number. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select Break. enter FR4. 47 In the drawing area. Click OK. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. under Identity Data. click below the first one to place it. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 35 Press ESC to end the command. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.

50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 54 Select all of the tags. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. enter a comma. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. click Training Files. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.rfa. and click Apply. 57 In the Filter dialog. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click Save. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Click OK. and for Category. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. Next you create a switch system. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Lighting Fixture Tags.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. for File Name. click (Open). click Check None. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.

11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 . for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

Lighting. for switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads. 4 In the Filter dialog. enter 2. click Training Files. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. and data systems. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Electrical Fixtures.rvt. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). for Hot Conductors. Circuits are used for power. and click Element Properties. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 7 In space Electrical 220. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. lighting. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . under Electrical .26 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Click OK. Click OK.

Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and in the drawing area.13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click to select the circuit. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wiring. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.rfa. and click Open.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Press Delete.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 28 In the drawing area. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. in space Instruction 221.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

1-#12. click Training Files. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. enter 30A. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. select panel LP-2B.rvt. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Rebalance Loads. Scroll down. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click Open. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#12. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Finally. 2 In the drawing area. 3 In the Electrical space. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the distribution is shifted. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Electrical 220. After re-balancing loads. 6 Click OK. Under Electrical-Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Had there been a greater imbalance. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Click OK.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 1-#10. 1-#10. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.

and click OK. 24 Click Select Panel. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.Loads. and click Finish Editing Circuit. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. for Rating. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 40A. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 25A. and click OK. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Electrical .Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. select the transformer TP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 17 Close the warning dialog.

select Bold and Italic. under Other. click (Open). Under Body Text. for Font. for Font Size. Click OK. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.rvt. enter 4 mm. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 4 Close the report. 5 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. expand Sheets (all). You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Under Header Text. and open E601 . 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. enter 5 mm. Select PP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. for Font Size. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 10 Click OK twice. select Berlin Sans FB. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Under Header Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel.Panel Schedules. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.

■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. each with a load of 180VA. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.rvt. select space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. click Training Files. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click (Open). notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Expand Unassigned.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. In the System Browser. Checking Your Design | 215 . 20 On the Options Bar. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. zoom to space Electrical 214. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Select panel LP-2C. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 16 Close the details dialog.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. under Warnings. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. for Panel.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

rvt. 4 In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. right-click PVC . In this exercise.Design is open. and click Properties. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Duplicate. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. type PVC . Adding a pipe size.Plumbing Plan . 219 . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. planning is critical to a successful design. in addition to loading existing families. In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Vent. click Training Files.Sanitary. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

Vent is listed. 6 Click OK. 25 For Outside. 27 For the new pipe size. select Plastic. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. In the Project Browser. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 For System Type.rfa.Sch 40 . enter -1250. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the left pane. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 21 In the right pane. select Sanitary. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC .DWV. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.000 mm. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.DWV: Standard. select Sanitary. select Branch.293 mm. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. enter 46. for Material. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 24 For Inside Diameter. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. enter 54. 15 For System Type. select M_Tee Sanitary . select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . enter 10°. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. enter 45. under Pipe Types. 26 Click OK. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. and click Main. click Modify. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 13 In the right panel. 22 Click New Size. For Offset. Cross. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.PVC .Sch 40 . for Nominal. and open Metric\M_Trap P . click Pipe Settings. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. PVC . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV: Standard.006 mm.Sch 40 . and click OK. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Tee. click Training Files. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.PVC . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Tap. select Tee. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select None.

including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the cold water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. add a hot water heater. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. select Sanitary 107. for example. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. The base is placed. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 27 For Offset. 23 For Pipe Type. 29 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and click Settings. click Solutions. for Solution Type. enter 1. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and for Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -350 mm. for Diameter. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 30 Click Modify. 21 On Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.Sanitary. 24 For Offset. The default settings are automatically modified. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select PVC .Sanitary. enter -1225. select Main. 26 For Pipe Type. select Branch. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select 100 mm.05%. and modify it to meet project requirements. and click OK. 25 In the left pane. 28 On the Options Bar. select PVC . The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. enter -350 mm. for Slope. You accept this suggested solution. select Intersections.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. as shown.

click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown.

click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under M_Lavatory .rvt. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 4 On the Element panel.Design is open.Rectangular. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Placement panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . as shown.Public. in the Type Selector. select 560 mmx560 mm . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .

8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 711. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. and press Enter to create a second sink.2. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify.

2. enter 711. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 12 In the drawing area. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 11 In the System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. click Add To System. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. 19 In the 3D view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. 20 Select the fitting. click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ 3D Views.16 On the Edit System panel. double-click 3D Plumbing .Overall. In the System Browser. 21 Select the tee. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

When you press the Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe.22 In the plan view. enter 1.05%. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. for Offset. with the tee fitting selected. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click to draw the pipe. press Spacebar. and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 760 mm. 24 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select Standard. 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and when the vertical center line displays.

and click Draw Pipe. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. In the next steps. and press Enter. right-click the right connector. zoom in to the double wye fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 150 mm. on the Options Bar. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. 37 Select the fitting. enter 305 mm.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. as shown.

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 49 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 47 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify.

DWV. 53 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 55 In the 3D view. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard. under M_Trap P .Sch 40 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Move the cursor to the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 150 mm. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify.. select the left P-Trap.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. for Slope. verify that 1. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. adjusting the sanitary stack.05% is selected. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.

Sch 40 .Design. select the elbow fitting on the right.Plumbing Plan .DWV. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the vertical stack. as shown. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the Type Selector.Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Modify. 10 In the 3D view. 3 In the Section view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . right-click the top connector.Floor level line.PVC . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel.Design. and click to draw the pipe. 5 Select the tee. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 267 . and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this tutorial. and click Duplicate. After finishing each exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. However. In this lesson. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.rvt. If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. you can choose to save your work. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

structural beams. select Main. In the left pane. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For Offset. or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For System Type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. However. Next. and enter Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is specified. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click Rename.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. In the next exercise. For Offset. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. and click Properties. select Carbon Steel. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. duct. under Mechanical. verify that 2800 is selected. for Material. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Pipe Type. 9 Click OK. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In this exercise. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties.

rvt. select the upper half of the building. under Fire Protection. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. the space crossing lines display.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Add. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Name. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Categories. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and click Element Properties. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 5 Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK. click Training Files. For Group parameter under. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. right-click. 8 Using a crossing window.

to which you add various parameters. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. enter Zone 2. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. verify that only Spaces are selected. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. including a calculated value parameter. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. select Zone 1. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. Obstructed-Combustible. For Group parameter under. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click the Formatting tab. enter Maximum Spacing. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Key name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Maximum Spacing. select Fire Protection. 6 Using the same method. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Light. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Name. select Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select 0 decimal places. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Type of Parameter. select Spaces. 11 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. For Name. The schedule displays. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK. For Units. Click OK. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select mm.Design is highlighted. For Rounding. For Unit symbol. click Add Parameter. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator. enter Protection Area Construction Type. and on the ribbon. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Select Schedule keys. select Millimeters. 14 Select the new header.

NOTE The units of measure display automatically. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 4575. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. For Name. Click OK. enter 40. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column.

For Formula. select 0 decimal place. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Type. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Fixed. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. select Area. and click Field Format. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Units. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. enter Minimum Sprinklers.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. click . and click OK. In the Fields dialog. Click OK. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Rounding. select Number. 20 On the Formatting tab. under Available fields. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Common. select Minimum Sprinklers.

select Number. and then click Field Format. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. 26 Click OK 3 times. and select Totals only. At the bottom of the dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. select Level.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Then by. ■ In the Format dialog. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. For Fields. For Then by (second instance). select Minimum Sprinklers. under Other. for Sort by. select Hidden field. select Level. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Sprinkler Zone. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. and then select Hidden field.

System Name. for Embedded Schedule. for Filter by. Under Field formatting. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and Count. 30 Click OK twice. right-click the schedule. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and click View Properties. click Edit. select Sprinklers. and click View Properties. click Edit. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. for Available fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals. For Category.27 In the drawing area. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Calculate totals. select Level equals Level 2. under Other. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and select Totals only. for Filter. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Fields.

select Ordinary. under Identity Data. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. but their values are not determined. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 41 In the plan view. select space 221 Instruction. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Unobstructed. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 48 In the floor plan. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. As a result. 46 With the space still selected. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 52 Click OK. and click OK. select Ordinary. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 43 Click Cancel. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. double-click FP . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. 279 . click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . If the tutorial training files are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. methodology. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. As you place the sprinklers. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the left pane of the Open dialog. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.autodesk. As you create the system. After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.

When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 3 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. After placing the initial sprinkler.

select the sprinklers that you placed. and 207. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 11 In the drawing area. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 206. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In space Instruction 202.

16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. specify a vertical offset. open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers.Fire Protection Piping Plan . as shown. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 17 In the Project Browser. Next. and 200C). Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.Design. 18 Type WT. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.

you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). enter 11. After creating the logical connection.FP_Ceiling view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. In this exercise. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. move the cursor to the right. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and click Element Properties. and with piping (physical connection). click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This number is determined in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 29 Press Esc. Notice that the schedule updates. 25 Click OK. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you adjust the offset. Next. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. In the next exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. enter 2900 mm. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. For Number. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and press Enter. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 4100. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.19 In the floor plan. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. for Offset.0. under Constraints.

As you assign sprinklers to systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 1 In the Project Browser.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Unlike logical connections (systems). Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. click View ➤ Systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Fire Protection Plan . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and select Piping. 5 Right-click the header. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. However. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.rvt. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.

you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 11 With the system still selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . and select the system. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and click Select. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. named Fire Protection Wet. indicating the logical connection. within the Piping Systems folder. select an initial piping layout. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. In the System Browser. Next.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. press Tab. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. place the cursor over a sprinkler. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

for System Name. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 22 On the Options Bar.The Edit Piping System panel displays. 12 On the Options Bar. as shown. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .0 is specified. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. enter -3650. and a piping layout preview displays. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). select Branch. 19 Click OK. click Settings. select 150 mm. 13 In the System Browser. and number of elements in the system. verify that 2800. In the left pane. 23 For Offset. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that Main is selected. When the layout is finished. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Solutions. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. enter FP Wet_Zone2. system equipment. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and on the Options Bar. providing system editing tools. for Diameter.Wet is selected. click Place Base. 15 In the drawing area. For Offset.

25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. On the Generate Layout panel. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. and select solution 4. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Creating a Piping System | 287 . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. In general. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 32 If necessary. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 29 Click Finish Layout.

Next. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click Training Files. and various manual pipe creation tools.33 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the Connect Into tool. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 3 If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the elbow fitting as shown. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.

click Add To System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 5 In the drawing area. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . mechanical equipment. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. 8 In the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. 9 On the Edit System panel.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). radiators. click Finish Editing System. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. air terminals. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.

and then tile the views. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 21 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 12 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. verify that Network is selected. for Solution Type. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. verify that Solutions is selected. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 .11 On the Generate Layout panel. 13 Click Finish Layout. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System.

Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 In the drawing area. 29 Using the same method. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 2800. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.24 In the Piping Plan. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. and then press Esc. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click. for Offset. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 25 Select the sprinkler.

Because the whole system highlights. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. click Training Files. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select 1 : 50. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Fire Protection Piping Plan . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 31 In the plan view. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

For Default View Template.Fire Protection Plan . and click Draw Pipe. 14 Select the tee fitting.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. select FP . 12 If necessary. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. select MEP Section. 19 Make Level 2 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For View Classification. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . right-click Design ➤ FP . 17 Move the cursor up. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then right-click the top connector.Design. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. Click OK. enter FP Section_Stair. select Design. Under Identity Data. enter 2135. for View Name. drag the top section boundary line up.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. and click Apply Default View Template. and then click Modify. and press Enter.Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 22 In the drawing area. 10 In the Project Browser. and select Hose Reel Cabinet .

27 On the Placement Tools panel. and then click Modify.23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and click Draw Pipe. select . 26 On the Options Bar. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 Select the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. for Diameter.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down.

33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify. click Yes to load a family. verify that M_Gate Valve . as shown. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and click Open. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.50 mm is selected.rfa. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .29 Close the section view. 32 In the Open dialog. 31 In the alert dialog.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.rvt. click Training Files. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 36 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. click Check None. height. Changing the diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. or height. width. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select 25mm. and click OK. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). width. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. for Diameter.

11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. select the linked architectural file. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view.rfa. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 18 In the 3D view. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . NOTE Tags are view specific. Clear Leader. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. and click Open. click to place the tag. . and after each segment highlights. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 12 If necessary. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 17 On the View Control Bar. By hiding the linked file. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Press Esc.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. and when the section highlights. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. select 100mm. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. 21 On the Options Bar.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. select 40mm. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. and then tag the piping as shown. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. The pipe diameter is modified.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags to pipes. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. In this exercise. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. For additional practice. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. In this tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. you created a wet fire protection system.

304 .

create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .

306 .

and click OK. and click Rename. dependent views. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and apply a view template. matchlines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Training Files. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties.rvt. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and view references. 307 .

under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. views and put them on the sheet. as shown. click Training Files. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 10 In the drawing area. more focused. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 6 In the Project Browser. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and then press Esc. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 9 Click OK.rvt. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 7 Close the file without saving. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Rename.

click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. 13 Press Esc twice. and then press Esc. Click OK. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 19 In the drawing area. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select black. select Double Dash . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the Color dialog. For Line Pattern. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.

25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. for Target view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.20 Select the upper view reference and.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Default View Template. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. click Training Files.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Using the same method. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Domestic Water. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and zoom to each of the view references. enter Plumbing Isometric . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Plumbing Isometric. and click Properties. and select the section box. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 3D Plumbing. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 2 Zoom in. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. for View Name. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.

select Dash. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. and click to select it. 6 In the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 10 Right-click. select Plumbing. For Pattern. for View Classification. Click Apply. select 3. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. select Documentation.Domestic Water. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and then click OK. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.

15 Right-click. and click to select it.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.5mm Arial. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. For Slope. verify that Common is selected.16 Press Esc. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. specify Plumbing . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Sanitary Waste. and for Default View Template.Isometric. and in the Type Selector. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. On the View Control Bar. 19 Using methods learned previously. and in the view properties. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. select 1. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click on the Format value.

25 Move the cursor above the pipe.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Rounding. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. When the view is associated with a sheet. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. as shown. 26 Press Esc twice. select To the nearest 10. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 22 Click OK twice. indicating that it’s the active view. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.■ In the Format dialog.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Callout Views | 317 . for Scale. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1 : 50. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. select 5. under Sheets (all).HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. drag it to the sheet. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. double-click M601 . and select the viewport.

right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 319 . enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. For Title on Sheet. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. right-click the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating Callout Views | 321 . enter Typical WSHP Detail.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

322 .

click Training Files. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. as shown. and annotation to create a legend. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. 323 . duct tags. symbols. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. work with model-based components. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. linetypes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and select 1. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 9 Press Esc twice.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 325 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

21 In the Load Family dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.17 Click Modify. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 20 In the Tags dialog. under Category. 24 On the Options Bar. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. for Ducts. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. If necessary. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 25 In the drawing area. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. as shown. click Load. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. clear Leader. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa.

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. Leader. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Creating Annotations | 327 . and Attached End. and then press Esc. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.26 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. as shown. select Free End. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 36 Press Esc twice.33 On the Options Bar.

3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. for Leader Arrowhead. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area.rvt. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. click Training Files. That’s because you changed a type property. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 40 Using the method learned previously. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. not simply an instance property. and lock lighting fixtures. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Creating Dimensions | 329 . indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lay out. and click OK. and all elements of that type are affected. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 12 Click EQ. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. select the dimension line. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 14 Using the same method. and then select the interior face of the wall.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Press Esc. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.

rvt.9). linework. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the dimensions are locked. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend | 331 . click the 3 interior locks on the line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and notes. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. click Training Files. enter 2430. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. annotation symbols. and offset them from the wall. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and press Enter. 20 Using the same methods.

■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1 : 50.200 Neck. For View. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and select 1.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Floor Plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click in the drawing area. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale. Click OK.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Diffuser Legend. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Using the same method.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .

14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 333 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP and its text note. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the component’s break line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 26 Press Esc.

MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.30 Select Spot Elevation . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 335 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 34 Using the method learned previously. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify.

39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting view using detail components. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 337 . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text.113 East elevation view.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A detail callout that references another view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser . 8 Using the same method.113 East on the sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 5 In the drawing area. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click to place it. clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.

10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. under Identity Data. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. for Title on Sheet. 12 Select the Level 1 line. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click OK. right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and select Title w Line . you add wiring to the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 22 Press Esc. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Activate View. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. verify that Chain is selected. In the Line Styles dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the New Subcategory dialog.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.113 North view. click New. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Electrical Power. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 8 On the Options Bar. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. as shown. for Line Weight. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer.rvt. As you draw. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. notice that there are no snaps active. click Training Files. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. enter 3mm. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown.

29 Click Modify. 28 Click above the cap. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 33 On the Options Bar. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 31 While pressing Ctrl.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

enter 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . change the length of the bottom line to 3. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. you can ensure that they stay together. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. You enter exact values for each line length. 40 Press Esc. Using the same method. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click on the length dimension value.0. and then press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 7. 42 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and press Enter. enter 12.

while pressing Ctrl. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 54 Select the group. enter Ground. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. select all 3 lines. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 47 In the drawing area. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 51 Using the method learned previously. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. TP-2B. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Name. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. 50 With the group selected. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Back.rvt. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and Left sides converge.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). click Training Files. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then press Esc. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click the copy. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Home. Walkthroughs. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 8 On the ViewCube. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and double click Typical Make Up Air. for Name. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. select 3D Views. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 3 Select the section box.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Typical. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 15 Using the same method. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and click to specify the second leader point. Click OK. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). select 3D HVAC Iso. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.■ ■ Under Names. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

To rotate and reposition a text label. and under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop Region Visible. as shown.18 Press Esc. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 23 Click on the crop region. under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 19 Complete the text labels. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Deactivate View. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. Place a detail component. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and under Extents. click Training Files. and click OK. scroll down.25 Click OK. 29 Right click the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 33 Right-click the view.rvt. and click View Properties. 30 On the View Control Bar. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. select Crop View and Section Box. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 32 In the Instance Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click Activate View.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. For Scale. select 1 : 5. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Documentation. 12 On the Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. click the point at the top of the drain. right-click the view name. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. for Sub-Discipline. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select Plumbing. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Properties. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 3 In the Project Browser.

I. for Type. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Concrete. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . select C. and click OK.P. 22 Click Modify. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 28 Click Modify. 34 Press Esc. select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the filled region.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. (Line). and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. 40 Click Finish Region. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then press Esc.

and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. (Rectangle). select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 45 Using the method learned previously. 52 In the Create Group dialog. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.D. press Tab to highlight the chain. draw wide detail lines as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. press Spacebar twice. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

67 On the Options Bar. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.62 Press Esc twice. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.

72 If necessary.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click OK.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 80 Press Esc twice. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the second leader point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. select 15000 (Division 15 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and click to specify the text insertion point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 71 Click Modify.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc twice. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful